1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Steel Buildings Shop By Use Case

Whatever you need a steel building for — workshop, retail showroom, fleet garage, horse barn, RV storage, distribution warehouse, indoor arena or worship hall — Steel and Stud engineers the right structure for your use. Browse our use-case catalog of pre-engineered buildings from $14,500. Every order includes PE-stamped drawings tailored to your local wind and snow loads, plus free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors when your use case calls for it.

$14,500
STARTING PRICE
13+
BUILDING TYPES
200ft
MAX CLEAR SPAN
48
STATES COVERED
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Browse Use Cases

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 801–840 of 1025 resultsSorted by price: low to high

30×30 Pre-Engineered Commercial Metal Building for Municipal Institutional Storage with Clear Height up to 20 Ft

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

30′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×30 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud — From $17,650
12
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,100$17,650SAVE $2,450
or $368/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×30Municipal Institutional Storage

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Institutional Storage·Size30×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,650$20,100Save $2,450
or as low as $368/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×30
30×30
this size
$17,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 900 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X30-MUNICIPAL-INSTITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal utility building.

30 feet wide × 30 feet long. Code-compliant public-entry spec. The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

Public service areaSecure records / storageSTAFF + BREAK AREA30′ × 30′ · 900 sq ft · municipal utility building

Public service area · Secure records / storage · Staff + break area

Public service area at the front, secure records / storage in the middle, staff + break area at the rear. Capacity: single-department outpost.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: ADA entry, security vestibule.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Institutional Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal institutional storage
Everyday municipal institutional storage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal institutional storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
municipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage — what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$368/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×30 municipal institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $368/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×30?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 30′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Institutional Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×30

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

30×30 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →
🏡 30×30

Workshop / Hobby Shop

30×30 workshop / hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →
🏡 30×30

Metal Carport

30×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 30×30

Commercial Steel Building

30×30 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×30

RV / Boat Storage

30×30 rv / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×30

Home Gym / Studio

30×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 30×30

Metal Barn

30×30 metal barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn →
🎯 30×30

Man Cave / She Shed

30×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 30×30

Storage / Light Industrial Shop

30×30 storage / light industrial shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage / Light Industrial Shop →
🌾 30×30

Equipment Barn

30×30 equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Barn →
🏛️ 30×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

30×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Institutional Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage cost?

A 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $368/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×30 municipal institutional storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×30 municipal institutional storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×30 municipal institutional storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $368/month on a 30×30 municipal institutional storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×30 municipal institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×30 municipal institutional storage typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×30 Pre-Engineered Commercial Metal Building for Municipal Institutional Storage with Clear Height up to 20 Ft

900 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

30′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×30 steel building delivers 900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud — From $17,650
12
30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,100$17,650SAVE $2,450
or $368/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×30Municipal Institutional Storage

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Institutional Storage·Size30×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,650$20,100Save $2,450
or as low as $368/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×30
30×30
this size
$17,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 900 sq ft enclosed
  • 900 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X30-MUNICIPAL-INSTITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal utility building.

30 feet wide × 30 feet long. Code-compliant public-entry spec. The 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud puts 900 sq ft to work.

Public service areaSecure records / storageSTAFF + BREAK AREA30′ × 30′ · 900 sq ft · municipal utility building

Public service area · Secure records / storage · Staff + break area

Public service area at the front, secure records / storage in the middle, staff + break area at the rear. Capacity: single-department outpost.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: ADA entry, security vestibule.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width30'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Institutional Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal institutional storage
Everyday municipal institutional storage
900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal institutional storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
municipal institutional storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage — what makes it different.

900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$368/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×30 municipal institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $368/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×30?

900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 30′ footprint with 900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,200–$10,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×30 Municipal Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Institutional Storage also viewed:

🏡 30×30

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

30×30 metal garage (3 to 4 cars) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars) →
🏡 30×30

Workshop / Hobby Shop

30×30 workshop / hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Shop →
🏡 30×30

Metal Carport

30×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 30×30

Commercial Steel Building

30×30 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×30

RV / Boat Storage

30×30 rv / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×30

Home Gym / Studio

30×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 30×30

Metal Barn

30×30 metal barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn →
🎯 30×30

Man Cave / She Shed

30×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 30×30

Storage / Light Industrial Shop

30×30 storage / light industrial shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage / Light Industrial Shop →
🌾 30×30

Equipment Barn

30×30 equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Barn →
🏛️ 30×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

30×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Institutional Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage cost?

A 30×30 municipal institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $17,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $368/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×30 municipal institutional storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Almost always for 900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×30 municipal institutional storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×30 municipal institutional storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $368/month on a 30×30 municipal institutional storage.

What warranty comes with the 30×30 municipal institutional storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×30 municipal institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×30 municipal institutional storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×30 municipal institutional storage typically adds $7,200–$10,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Prefab Metal Building Kit for Equipment Lean-To Shed with Customizable Leg Height up to 20 Ft

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Equipment Lean To Shed

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Lean To Shed·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 630 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Lean To Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Lean To Shed spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Lean To Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment lean to shed
Everyday equipment lean to shed
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
equipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 equipment lean to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Lean To Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Lean To Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Storage Shop →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Lean To Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed cost?

A 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 equipment lean to shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 equipment lean to shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 equipment lean to shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 equipment lean to shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 equipment lean to shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 equipment lean to shed typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Lean To Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x35 metal building: primary product hero render (630 sq ft, proportion-matched from 30×60 source) from Steel and Stud

18×35 Prefab Metal Building Kit for Equipment Lean-To Shed with Customizable Leg Height up to 20 Ft

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed | Steel and Stud — From $9,300
12
18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×35Equipment Lean To Shed

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Lean To Shed·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 630 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. The 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud puts 630 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: tool cage, material racking, lockable walk-in door.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Lean To Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Lean To Shed spec sheet.

Width18'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Lean To Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment lean to shed
Everyday equipment lean to shed
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
equipment lean to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed — what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 equipment lean to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Lean To Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Equipment Lean To Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Lean To Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →
🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →
🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →
🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Storage Shop →
🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →
🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport with Storage Room →
🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Lean To Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed cost?

A 18×35 equipment lean to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 equipment lean to shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean to shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 equipment lean to shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 equipment lean to shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 equipment lean to shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 equipment lean to shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 equipment lean to shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 equipment lean to shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 equipment lean to shed typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Lean To Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

10×20 Prefab Steel Storage Building for Motorcycle ATV Storage with Eave Height up to 20 Ft

200 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×20 steel building delivers 200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage | Steel and Stud — From $2,950
12
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,350$2,950SAVE $400
or $61/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings10×20Motorcycle ATV Storage

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Motorcycle ATV Storage·Size10×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,950$3,350Save $400
or as low as $61/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×20
10×20
this size
$2,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 200 sq ft enclosed
  • 200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your gear + toy locker.

10 feet wide × 20 feet long. Ramp-friendly threshold, lockable man door. The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

Bike / sled slotsWall gear racksBench corner10′ × 20′ · 200 sq ft · gear + toy locker

Bike / sled slots · Wall gear racks · Bench corner

Bike / sled slots at the front, wall gear racks in the middle, bench corner at the rear. Capacity: 6 bikes/sleds + gear.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wall hooks, floor anchors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width10'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle atv storage
Everyday motorcycle atv storage
200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage — what makes it different.

200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$61/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×20 motorcycle atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $61/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×20?

200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 20′ footprint with 200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,600–$2,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 10×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

10×20 single-vehicle carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →
🏡 10×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

10×20 enclosed metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →
🏡 10×20

Metal Storage Shed

10×20 metal storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Storage Shed →
🏡 10×20

Backyard Workshop

10×20 backyard workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop →
🌾 10×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

10×20 equipment & hay shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →
🏡 10×20

Pool House / Cabana

10×20 pool house / cabana configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House / Cabana →
🏡 10×20

Home Office / Studio

10×20 home office / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office / Studio →
🌾 10×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

10×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →
🏢 10×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

10×20 mobile office / job site configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →
🎯 10×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

10×20 hobby room / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →
🏡 10×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

10×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage cost?

A 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $61/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Almost always for 200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $61/month on a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×20 motorcycle atv storage typically adds $1,600–$2,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$2,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

10×20 Prefab Steel Storage Building for Motorcycle ATV Storage with Eave Height up to 20 Ft

200 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×20 steel building delivers 200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage | Steel and Stud — From $2,950
12
10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,350$2,950SAVE $400
or $61/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings10×20Motorcycle ATV Storage

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Motorcycle ATV Storage·Size10×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,950$3,350Save $400
or as low as $61/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×20
10×20
this size
$2,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 200 sq ft enclosed
  • 200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your gear + toy locker.

10 feet wide × 20 feet long. Ramp-friendly threshold, lockable man door. The 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud puts 200 sq ft to work.

Bike / sled slotsWall gear racksBench corner10′ × 20′ · 200 sq ft · gear + toy locker

Bike / sled slots · Wall gear racks · Bench corner

Bike / sled slots at the front, wall gear racks in the middle, bench corner at the rear. Capacity: 6 bikes/sleds + gear.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wall hooks, floor anchors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width10'
Length20' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle atv storage
Everyday motorcycle atv storage
200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage — what makes it different.

200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$61/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×20 motorcycle atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $61/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×20?

200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 20′ footprint with 200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,600–$2,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 10×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×20 Motorcycle ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

10×20 single-vehicle carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →
🏡 10×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

10×20 enclosed metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →
🏡 10×20

Metal Storage Shed

10×20 metal storage shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Storage Shed →
🏡 10×20

Backyard Workshop

10×20 backyard workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop →
🌾 10×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

10×20 equipment & hay shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →
🏡 10×20

Pool House / Cabana

10×20 pool house / cabana configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House / Cabana →
🏡 10×20

Home Office / Studio

10×20 home office / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office / Studio →
🌾 10×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

10×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →
🏢 10×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

10×20 mobile office / job site configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →
🎯 10×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

10×20 hobby room / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →
🏡 10×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

10×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage cost?

A 10×20 motorcycle atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $61/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Almost always for 200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $61/month on a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×20 motorcycle atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×20 motorcycle atv storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×20 motorcycle atv storage typically adds $1,600–$2,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Custom Clear-Span Metal Building Kit for Indoor Sports Facility with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $212,800
12
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$242,600$212,800SAVE $29,800
or $4433/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$212,800$242,600Save $29,800
or as low as $4433/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$212,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4433/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4433/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor sports facility cost?

A 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $212,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4433/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4433/month on a 75×100 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 indoor sports facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$212,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Custom Clear-Span Metal Building Kit for Indoor Sports Facility with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $212,800
12
75×100 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$242,600$212,800SAVE $29,800
or $4433/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$212,800$242,600Save $29,800
or as low as $4433/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$212,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4433/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4433/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor sports facility cost?

A 75×100 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $212,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4433/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4433/month on a 75×100 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 indoor sports facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$212,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×30 Residential Metal Building for Man Cave and She Shed with Adjustable Leg Heights up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Man Cave She Shed

25×30 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 30 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×30

Home Gym / Studio

25×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 man cave she shed typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×30 Residential Metal Building for Man Cave and She Shed with Adjustable Leg Heights up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Man Cave She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Man Cave She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Man Cave She Shed

25×30 Man Cave She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Man Cave She Shed·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Stud-framed and drywall-ready interior when you finish it out. The 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Main loungeKitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 30 guests.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: media wall, covered porch, French doors.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Man Cave She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave she shed
Everyday man cave she shed
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave she shed + seasonal storage
man cave she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Man Cave She Shed — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 man cave she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Man Cave She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Man Cave She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×30

Home Gym / Studio

25×30 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 man cave she shed cost?

A 25×30 man cave she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 man cave she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 man cave she shed?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 man cave she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 man cave she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 man cave she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 man cave she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 man cave she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 man cave she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 man cave she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 man cave she shed typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×30 Custom Steel Building Kit for Home Gym Studio with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Home Gym Studio | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Home Gym Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Home Gym Studio

25×30 Home Gym Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Studio·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~16 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Home Gym Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym studio
Everyday home gym studio
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym studio + seasonal storage
home gym studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Home Gym Studio — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 home gym studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Home Gym Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Home Gym Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🎯 25×30

Man Cave / She Shed

25×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 home gym studio cost?

A 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 home gym studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 home gym studio?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 home gym studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 home gym studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 home gym studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 home gym studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 home gym studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 home gym studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 home gym studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 home gym studio typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×30 Custom Steel Building Kit for Home Gym Studio with Leg Height up to 20 Ft

750 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×30 steel building delivers 750 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×30 Home Gym Studio | Steel and Stud — From $15,700
12
25×30 Home Gym Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,900$15,700SAVE $2,200
or $327/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×30Home Gym Studio

25×30 Home Gym Studio, built for daily backyard use.

The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Studio·Size25×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,700$17,900Save $2,200
or as low as $327/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×30
25×30
this size
$15,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 750 sq ft enclosed
  • 750 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

25 feet wide × 30 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud puts 750 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane25′ × 30′ · 750 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~16 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×30 Home Gym Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
750 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Studio spec sheet.

Width25'
Length30' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space750 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym studio
Everyday home gym studio
750 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym studio + seasonal storage
home gym studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×30 Home Gym Studio — what makes it different.

750sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$327/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×30 home gym studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $327/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×30?

750 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 30′ footprint with 750 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,000–$9,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×30 Home Gym Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×30 Home Gym Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×30

Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage)

25×30 metal garage (2 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×30

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×30 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×30

Metal Carport

25×30 metal carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport →
🏢 25×30

Commercial Storage Building

25×30 commercial storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Storage Building →
🏡 25×30

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×30 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🌾 25×30

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

25×30 metal barn / equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter →
🎯 25×30

Man Cave / She Shed

25×30 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×30

Shop / Light Industrial Building

25×30 shop / light industrial building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Shop / Light Industrial Building →
🏛️ 25×30

Government / Institutional Storage

25×30 government / institutional storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional Storage →
🌾 25×30

Tack Room / Feed Storage

25×30 tack room / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 25×30

Community / Multi-Purpose Building

25×30 community / multi-purpose building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Multi-Purpose Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×30 home gym studio cost?

A 25×30 home gym studio from Steel and Stud starts at $15,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $327/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×30 home gym studio price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×30 home gym studio?

Almost always for 750+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×30 home gym studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×30 home gym studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×30 home gym studio without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $327/month on a 25×30 home gym studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×30 home gym studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×30 home gym studio in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×30 home gym studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×30 home gym studio typically adds $6,000–$9,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Pallet Rack Warehouse

75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Pallet Rack Warehouse·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-PALLET-RACK-WAREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pallet Rack Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pallet Rack Warehouse spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pallet Rack Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday pallet rack warehouse
Everyday pallet rack warehouse
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pallet rack warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpallet rack warehouse + seasonal storage
pallet rack warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 pallet rack warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pallet Rack Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pallet Rack Warehouse also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pallet Rack Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse cost?

A 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pallet rack warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pallet rack warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 pallet rack warehouse typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pallet Rack Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Pallet Rack Warehouse

75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Pallet Rack Warehouse·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-PALLET-RACK-WAREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pallet Rack Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pallet Rack Warehouse spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pallet Rack Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday pallet rack warehouse
Everyday pallet rack warehouse
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pallet rack warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpallet rack warehouse + seasonal storage
pallet rack warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 pallet rack warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pallet Rack Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Pallet Rack Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pallet Rack Warehouse also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pallet Rack Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse cost?

A 75×100 pallet rack warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pallet rack warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pallet rack warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 pallet rack warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 pallet rack warehouse add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 pallet rack warehouse typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pallet Rack Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Self-Storage Facility

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Self Storage Facility

75×100 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. The 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~56 mixed-size rentable units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: insulated wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 self storage facility cost?

A 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 self storage facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 self storage facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Self-Storage Facility

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Self Storage Facility

75×100 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. The 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~56 mixed-size rentable units.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: insulated wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 self storage facility cost?

A 75×100 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 self storage facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 self storage facility typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Auto Body Shop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Auto Body Shop | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Auto Body Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Auto Body Shop

75×100 Auto Body Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Body Shop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-AUTO-BODY-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. The 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

5+ service baysBODY / PAINT WINGParts warehouse + writers + waiting75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full-service auto center

5+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

5+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 5+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Auto Body Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Body Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Body Shop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Body Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto body shop
Everyday auto body shop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto body shop + seasonal storage
auto body shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Auto Body Shop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 auto body shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Body Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Auto Body Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Auto Body Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Body Shop also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Body Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 auto body shop cost?

A 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 auto body shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto body shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 auto body shop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto body shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 auto body shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 auto body shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 auto body shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 auto body shop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 auto body shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 auto body shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 auto body shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 auto body shop typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Body Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Auto Body Shop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Auto Body Shop | Steel and Stud — From $171,650
12
75×100 Auto Body Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$195,700$171,650SAVE $24,050
or $3576/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Auto Body Shop

75×100 Auto Body Shop, built for daily backyard use.

The 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Body Shop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$171,650$195,700Save $24,050
or as low as $3576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$171,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 7,500 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-AUTO-BODY-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. The 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud puts 7,500 sq ft to work.

5+ service baysBODY / PAINT WINGParts warehouse + writers + waiting75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full-service auto center

5+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

5+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 5+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Auto Body Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Body Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Body Shop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Body Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto body shop
Everyday auto body shop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto body shop + seasonal storage
auto body shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Auto Body Shop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 auto body shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Body Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Auto Body Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Auto Body Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Body Shop also viewed:

🏢 75×100

Distribution Center

75×100 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$157,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🎯 75×100

Indoor Sports Facility

75×100 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$212,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$171,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Body Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 auto body shop cost?

A 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud starts at $171,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 auto body shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto body shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 auto body shop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto body shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 auto body shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 auto body shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 auto body shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3576/month on a 75×100 auto body shop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 auto body shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 auto body shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 75×100 auto body shop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 75×100 auto body shop typically adds $60,000–$90,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Body Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$171,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Commercial Showroom Retail

80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Showroom Retail·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~4800 sf showroom, 2400 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom Retail spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom retail
Everyday commercial showroom retail
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 commercial showroom retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom Retail also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail cost?

A 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 commercial showroom retail price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial showroom retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 commercial showroom retail?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 commercial showroom retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 commercial showroom retail without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 commercial showroom retail.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 commercial showroom retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 commercial showroom retail in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 commercial showroom retail typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Commercial Showroom Retail

80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Showroom Retail·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~4800 sf showroom, 2400 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom Retail spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom retail
Everyday commercial showroom retail
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 commercial showroom retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Commercial Showroom Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom Retail also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail cost?

A 80×100 commercial showroom retail from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 commercial showroom retail price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial showroom retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 commercial showroom retail?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 commercial showroom retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 commercial showroom retail without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 commercial showroom retail.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 commercial showroom retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 commercial showroom retail in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 commercial showroom retail add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 commercial showroom retail typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Distribution Hub

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Distribution Hub

80×100 Distribution Hub, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Distribution Hub·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Distribution Hub — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 distribution hub cost?

A 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 distribution hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 distribution hub?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 distribution hub add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 distribution hub typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Distribution Hub

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Distribution Hub

80×100 Distribution Hub, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Distribution Hub·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Distribution Hub — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 distribution hub cost?

A 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 distribution hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 distribution hub?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 distribution hub add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 distribution hub typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. The 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Main production floorAssembly + QC + maintenanceWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 agricultural processing facility typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. The 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Main production floorAssembly + QC + maintenanceWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 agricultural processing facility typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal

80×100 Trucking Terminal, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 trucking terminal add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 trucking terminal typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal

80×100 Trucking Terminal, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 trucking terminal add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 trucking terminal typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse Inventory Storage

80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse inventory storage
Everyday warehouse inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 warehouse inventory storage typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse Inventory Storage

80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse inventory storage
Everyday warehouse inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 warehouse inventory storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 warehouse inventory storage typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center Fellowship Hall

80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Worship Center Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. The 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, classroom partitions, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center fellowship hall
Everyday worship center fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 worship center fellowship hall typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center Fellowship Hall

80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Worship Center Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. The 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, classroom partitions, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center fellowship hall
Everyday worship center fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 worship center fellowship hall add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 worship center fellowship hall typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility Indoor Sports

80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility Indoor Sports

80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 athletic facility indoor sports typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Municipal Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal Government Facility

80×100 Municipal Government Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. The 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKitchen + entry + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + entry + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal government facility
Everyday municipal government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal government facility + seasonal storage
municipal government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 municipal government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 municipal government facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 municipal government facility typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 Municipal Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal Government Facility

80×100 Municipal Government Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Municipal Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. The 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKitchen + entry + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + entry + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal government facility
Everyday municipal government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal government facility + seasonal storage
municipal government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 municipal government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 municipal government facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 municipal government facility typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations

80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $183,050
12
80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$208,700$183,050SAVE $25,650
or $3814/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations

80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$183,050$208,700Save $25,650
or as low as $3814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$146,450
80×100
this size
$183,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $183,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3814/month on a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 fleet garage vehicle operations typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$183,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $227,000
12
80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$258,800$227,000SAVE $31,800
or $4729/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory, built for daily backyard use.

The 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:RV Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$227,000$258,800Save $31,800
or as low as $4729/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$181,600
80×100
this size
$227,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 8,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides and roof-mounted gear. The 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud puts 8,000 sq ft to work.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple roll-up doors, tool wall, mezzanine storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4729/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4729/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$183,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$227,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $227,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4729/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4729/month on a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 80×100 rv boat dealership inventory typically adds $64,000–$96,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$227,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $271,850
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$309,900$271,850SAVE $38,050
or $5664/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$271,850$309,900Save $38,050
or as low as $5664/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$241,650
100×90
this size
$271,850
100×110
longer
$332,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. The 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5664/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5664/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $271,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5664/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5664/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 aircraft hangar add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 aircraft hangar typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$271,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $271,850
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$309,900$271,850SAVE $38,050
or $5664/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$271,850$309,900Save $38,050
or as low as $5664/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$241,650
100×90
this size
$271,850
100×110
longer
$332,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. The 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5664/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5664/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $271,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5664/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5664/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 aircraft hangar add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 aircraft hangar typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$271,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck Fleet Maintenance

100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet maintenance
Everyday truck fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 truck fleet maintenance typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck Fleet Maintenance

100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet maintenance
Everyday truck fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 truck fleet maintenance add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 truck fleet maintenance typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $329,500
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$375,650$329,500SAVE $46,150
or $6865/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building

100×90 Cold Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$329,500$375,650Save $46,150
or as low as $6865/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$292,900
100×90
this size
$329,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. The 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + equipment roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + equipment room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + equipment room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across insulated bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: R-30 insulated envelope, dock levelers, insulated partition walls.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6865/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6865/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $329,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6865/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6865/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 cold storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 cold storage building typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$329,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $329,500
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$375,650$329,500SAVE $46,150
or $6865/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building

100×90 Cold Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$329,500$375,650Save $46,150
or as low as $6865/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$292,900
100×90
this size
$329,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. The 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + equipment roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + equipment room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + equipment room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across insulated bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: R-30 insulated envelope, dock levelers, insulated partition walls.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6865/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6865/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $329,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6865/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6865/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 cold storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 cold storage building typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$329,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self Storage Facility

100×90 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
100×110
longer
$251,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. The 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + insulated wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + insulated wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + insulated wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-thru aisle, insulated unit rows, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 self storage facility typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self Storage Facility

100×90 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
100×110
longer
$251,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. The 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + insulated wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + insulated wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + insulated wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-thru aisle, insulated unit rows, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 self storage facility typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $255,350
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$291,100$255,350SAVE $35,750
or $5320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$255,350$291,100Save $35,750
or as low as $5320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$227,000
100×90
this size
$255,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $255,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5320/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 indoor sports facility typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$255,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $255,350
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$291,100$255,350SAVE $35,750
or $5320/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$255,350$291,100Save $35,750
or as low as $5320/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$227,000
100×90
this size
$255,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. The 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + entry + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + entry + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + entry + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5320/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5320/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $255,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5320/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5320/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 indoor sports facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 indoor sports facility typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$255,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 warehouse steel building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 warehouse steel building typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $205,950
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$234,800$205,950SAVE $28,850
or $4291/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$205,950$234,800Save $28,850
or as low as $4291/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$183,050
100×90
this size
$205,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 9,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud puts 9,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4291/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4291/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$164,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Metal Building →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$329,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$189,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Riding Arena →
🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$205,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$255,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $205,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4291/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4291/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 warehouse steel building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 warehouse steel building typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$205,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue Wedding Barn

100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Event Venue Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. The 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue wedding barn
Everyday event venue wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 event venue wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 event venue wedding barn typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue Wedding Barn

100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Event Venue Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. The 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue wedding barn
Everyday event venue wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 event venue wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 event venue wedding barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 event venue wedding barn typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership Service Building

100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. The 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingParts warehouse + writers + waiting100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership service building
Everyday auto dealership service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 auto dealership service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 auto dealership service building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 auto dealership service building typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership Service Building

100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. The 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingParts warehouse + writers + waiting100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership service building
Everyday auto dealership service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership service building from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 auto dealership service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 auto dealership service building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 auto dealership service building typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena Stable

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. The 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, ridge-vent package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena stable
Everyday indoor riding arena stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 indoor riding arena stable typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable | Steel and Stud — From $312,100
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$355,800$312,100SAVE $43,700
or $6502/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena Stable

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$312,100$355,800Save $43,700
or as low as $6502/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$312,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. The 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, ridge-vent package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena stable
Everyday indoor riding arena stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6502/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6502/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena stable from Steel and Stud starts at $312,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6502/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6502/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 indoor riding arena stable add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 indoor riding arena stable typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$312,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $251,700
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$286,950$251,700SAVE $35,250
or $5244/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$251,700$286,950Save $35,250
or as low as $5244/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$251,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5244/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5244/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $251,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5244/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5244/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 regional distribution center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 regional distribution center typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$251,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $251,700
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$286,950$251,700SAVE $35,250
or $5244/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$251,700$286,950Save $35,250
or as low as $5244/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$251,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5244/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5244/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $251,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5244/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5244/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 regional distribution center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 regional distribution center typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$251,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $231,550
12
100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,950$231,550SAVE $32,400
or $4824/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage Equipment Barn

100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hay Storage Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,550$263,950Save $32,400
or as low as $4824/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$231,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. The 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage equipment barn
Everyday hay storage equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4824/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4824/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $231,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4824/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4824/month on a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 hay storage equipment barn typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$231,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $231,550
12
100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,950$231,550SAVE $32,400
or $4824/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage Equipment Barn

100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Hay Storage Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,550$263,950Save $32,400
or as low as $4824/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$231,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 11,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. The 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud puts 11,000 sq ft to work.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage equipment barn
Everyday hay storage equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4824/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4824/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$402,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$251,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$312,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $231,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4824/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4824/month on a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×110 hay storage equipment barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×110 hay storage equipment barn typically adds $88,000–$132,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $252,600
12
100×120 Livestock Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$287,950$252,600SAVE $35,350
or $5263/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock Dairy Building

100×120 Livestock Dairy Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Livestock Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$252,600$287,950Save $35,350
or as low as $5263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$231,550
100×120
this size
$252,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. The 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Housing rows / free stallsCenter feed driveMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock dairy building
Everyday livestock dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $252,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5263/month on a 100×120 livestock dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 livestock dairy building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 livestock dairy building typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$252,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $252,600
12
100×120 Livestock Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$287,950$252,600SAVE $35,350
or $5263/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock Dairy Building

100×120 Livestock Dairy Building, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Livestock Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$252,600$287,950Save $35,350
or as low as $5263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$231,550
100×120
this size
$252,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. The 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Housing rows / free stallsCenter feed driveMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock dairy building
Everyday livestock dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5263/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $252,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5263/month on a 100×120 livestock dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 livestock dairy building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 livestock dairy building typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$252,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck Fleet Service Center

100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet service center
Everyday truck fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 truck fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 truck fleet service center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 truck fleet service center typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck Fleet Service Center

100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet service center
Everyday truck fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 truck fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 truck fleet service center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 truck fleet service center typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 distribution warehouse add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 distribution warehouse typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. The 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break room

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, insulation package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 distribution warehouse add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 distribution warehouse typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self Storage Facility

100×120 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. The 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + insulated wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + insulated wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + insulated wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-thru aisle, insulated unit rows, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 self storage facility typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $274,550
12
100×120 Self Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$313,000$274,550SAVE $38,450
or $5720/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self Storage Facility

100×120 Self Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Self Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,550$313,000Save $38,450
or as low as $5720/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$251,700
100×120
this size
$274,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. The 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + insulated wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + insulated wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + insulated wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-thru aisle, insulated unit rows, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self storage facility
Everyday self storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself storage facility + seasonal storage
self storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5720/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5720/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $274,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5720/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5720/month on a 100×120 self storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 self storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 self storage facility typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Self Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$274,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $340,450
12
100×120 Sports Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$388,100$340,450SAVE $47,650
or $7093/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports Recreation Facility

100×120 Sports Recreation Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Sports Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$340,450$388,100Save $47,650
or as low as $7093/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$312,100
100×120
this size
$340,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. The 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports recreation facility
Everyday sports recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7093/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7093/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $340,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7093/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7093/month on a 100×120 sports recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 sports recreation facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 sports recreation facility typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Sports Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$340,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $340,450
12
100×120 Sports Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$388,100$340,450SAVE $47,650
or $7093/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports Recreation Facility

100×120 Sports Recreation Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Sports Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$340,450$388,100Save $47,650
or as low as $7093/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$312,100
100×120
this size
$340,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. The 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports recreation facility
Everyday sports recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7093/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7093/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $340,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7093/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7093/month on a 100×120 sports recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 sports recreation facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 sports recreation facility typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Sports Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$340,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $340,450
12
100×120 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$388,100$340,450SAVE $47,650
or $7093/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail Showroom

100×120 Retail Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Retail Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$340,450$388,100Save $47,650
or as low as $7093/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$312,100
100×120
this size
$340,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7093/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7093/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $340,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7093/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7093/month on a 100×120 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 retail showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 retail showroom typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$340,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $340,450
12
100×120 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$388,100$340,450SAVE $47,650
or $7093/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail Showroom

100×120 Retail Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Retail Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$340,450$388,100Save $47,650
or as low as $7093/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$312,100
100×120
this size
$340,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 12,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7093/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7093/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$439,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$340,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$252,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $340,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7093/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7093/month on a 100×120 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×120 retail showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×120 retail showroom typically adds $96,000–$144,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$340,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $393,850
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$449,000$393,850SAVE $55,150
or $8205/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$393,850$449,000Save $55,150
or as low as $8205/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$362,400
100×150
this size
$393,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. The 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$8205/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $8205/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $393,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $8205/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $8205/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 aircraft hangar add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 aircraft hangar typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$393,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $393,850
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$449,000$393,850SAVE $55,150
or $8205/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$393,850$449,000Save $55,150
or as low as $8205/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$362,400
100×150
this size
$393,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. The 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$8205/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $8205/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $393,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $8205/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $8205/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 aircraft hangar add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 aircraft hangar typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$393,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $298,400
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$340,200$298,400SAVE $41,800
or $6217/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop

100×150 Commercial Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,400$340,200Save $41,800
or as low as $6217/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$274,550
100×150
this size
$298,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. The 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6217/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6217/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $298,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6217/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6217/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 commercial workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 commercial workshop typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$298,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $298,400
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$340,200$298,400SAVE $41,800
or $6217/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop

100×150 Commercial Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,400$340,200Save $41,800
or as low as $6217/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$274,550
100×150
this size
$298,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. The 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6217/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6217/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $298,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6217/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6217/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 commercial workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 commercial workshop typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$298,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $298,400
12
100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$340,200$298,400SAVE $41,800
or $6217/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck Fleet Service Center

100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,400$340,200Save $41,800
or as low as $6217/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$274,550
100×150
this size
$298,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet service center
Everyday truck fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6217/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6217/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $298,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6217/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck fleet service center?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6217/month on a 100×150 truck fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 truck fleet service center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 truck fleet service center typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$298,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $298,400
12
100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$340,200$298,400SAVE $41,800
or $6217/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck Fleet Service Center

100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Truck Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,400$340,200Save $41,800
or as low as $6217/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$274,550
100×150
this size
$298,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. The 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

7 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck fleet service center
Everyday truck fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6217/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6217/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $298,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6217/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck fleet service center?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6217/month on a 100×150 truck fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 truck fleet service center add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 truck fleet service center typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Truck Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$298,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $477,400
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$544,250$477,400SAVE $66,850
or $9946/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$477,400$544,250Save $66,850
or as low as $9946/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$439,300
100×150
this size
$477,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. The 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + equipment roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + equipment room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + equipment room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across insulated bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: R-30 insulated envelope, dock levelers, insulated partition walls.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$9946/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $9946/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $477,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $9946/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $9946/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 cold storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 cold storage facility typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$477,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $477,400
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$544,250$477,400SAVE $66,850
or $9946/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$477,400$544,250Save $66,850
or as low as $9946/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$439,300
100×150
this size
$477,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. The 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + equipment roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + equipment room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + equipment room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across insulated bays.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: R-30 insulated envelope, dock levelers, insulated partition walls.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$9946/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $9946/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $477,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $9946/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $9946/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 cold storage facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 cold storage facility typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$477,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail Showroom

100×150 Retail Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Retail Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail showroom?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 retail showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 retail showroom typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail Showroom

100×150 Retail Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Retail Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. The 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail showroom?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 retail showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 retail showroom typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $274,500
12
100×150 Equipment Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$312,950$274,500SAVE $38,450
or $5719/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment Hay Barn

100×150 Equipment Hay Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,500$312,950Save $38,450
or as low as $5719/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$252,600
100×150
this size
$274,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. The 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment hay barn
Everyday equipment hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5719/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5719/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $274,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5719/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment hay barn?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5719/month on a 100×150 equipment hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 equipment hay barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 equipment hay barn typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$274,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $274,500
12
100×150 Equipment Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$312,950$274,500SAVE $38,450
or $5719/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment Hay Barn

100×150 Equipment Hay Barn, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Equipment Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$274,500$312,950Save $38,450
or as low as $5719/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$252,600
100×150
this size
$274,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. The 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment hay barn
Everyday equipment hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5719/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5719/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $274,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5719/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment hay barn?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5719/month on a 100×150 equipment hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 equipment hay barn add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 equipment hay barn typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$274,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. The 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, ridge-vent package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 indoor riding arena add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 indoor riding arena typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. The 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, ridge-vent package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 indoor riding arena add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 indoor riding arena typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Sports Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports Recreation Facility

100×150 Sports Recreation Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Sports Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. The 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports recreation facility
Everyday sports recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports recreation facility?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 sports recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 sports recreation facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 sports recreation facility typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Sports Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $370,000
12
100×150 Sports Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$421,800$370,000SAVE $51,800
or $7708/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports Recreation Facility

100×150 Sports Recreation Facility, built for daily backyard use.

The 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Sports Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$370,000$421,800Save $51,800
or as low as $7708/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$340,450
100×150
this size
$370,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 15,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. The 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud puts 15,000 sq ft to work.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports recreation facility
Everyday sports recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$7708/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $7708/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$477,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$370,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$274,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $370,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $7708/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports recreation facility?

Almost always for 2,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $7708/month on a 100×150 sports recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×150 sports recreation facility add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×150 sports recreation facility typically adds $120,000–$180,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Sports Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$370,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $7,550
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport

16×40 Metal Carport, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud puts 640 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$7,550
18×40
wider
$8,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 640 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. The 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud puts 640 sq ft to work.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Small Commercial Storage

16×40 small commercial storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storage →
🏡 16×40

Man Cave / She Shed

16×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×40 metal carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×40 metal carport typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $7,550
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,600$7,550SAVE $1,050
or $157/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport

16×40 Metal Carport, built for daily backyard use.

The 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud puts 640 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,550$8,600Save $1,050
or as low as $157/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$7,550
18×40
wider
$8,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 640 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. The 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud puts 640 sq ft to work.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$157/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $157/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Small Commercial Storage

16×40 small commercial storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storage →
🏡 16×40

Man Cave / She Shed

16×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $7,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $157/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $157/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×40 metal carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×40 metal carport typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop Garage | Steel and Stud — From $43,950
12
40×48 Home Workshop Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$50,100$43,950SAVE $6,150
or $916/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop Garage

40×48 Home Workshop Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,920 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Workshop Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$43,950$50,100Save $6,150
or as low as $916/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$43,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,920 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,920 sq ft to work.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop garage
Everyday home workshop garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop garage + seasonal storage
home workshop garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$916/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $916/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 40×48

Barndominium

40×48 barndominium configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏭 40×48

Equipment Storage

40×48 equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🎯 40×48

Man Cave & Garage

40×48 man cave & garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud starts at $43,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $916/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $916/month on a 40×48 home workshop garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$43,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop Garage | Steel and Stud — From $43,950
12
40×48 Home Workshop Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$50,100$43,950SAVE $6,150
or $916/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop Garage

40×48 Home Workshop Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,920 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Workshop Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$43,950$50,100Save $6,150
or as low as $916/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$43,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,920 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud puts 1,920 sq ft to work.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop garage
Everyday home workshop garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop garage + seasonal storage
home workshop garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$916/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $916/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 40×48

Barndominium

40×48 barndominium configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏭 40×48

Equipment Storage

40×48 equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$43,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🎯 40×48

Man Cave & Garage

40×48 man cave & garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$54,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop garage from Steel and Stud starts at $43,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $916/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $916/month on a 40×48 home workshop garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$43,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Building Fits Your Use? Design It in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Instant Estimate

Building Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Pre-Engineered Steel

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Over Stick-Built

For every use case — workshop, garage, agricultural, retail, fleet, equestrian — pre-engineered steel beats stick-built on timeline, lifetime cost and durability. Here is why thousands of owners chose Steel and Stud for their specific use.

📈

40 to 60% Lower Total Build Cost

Factory fabrication cuts on-site labor, eliminates material waste and compresses your project timeline from months to weeks. Most owners save $15 to $30/sqft versus comparable wood-frame or concrete block construction.

📑

PE-Stamped Drawings Included

Structural engineering and stamped plans come standard with every cold-formed steel order. Designed for your local wind speed, snow load and seismic zone. Submit directly to your building department for permit approval.

Column-Free Interiors to 200+ Feet

Rigid frame engineering eliminates support columns inside the building envelope. Use every square foot of floor space for equipment, inventory, vehicles, courts or congregation seating without obstruction.

🔨

Zero Rot, Warp or Termite Risk

Galvanized steel framing and coated panels resist corrosion, mold and insect damage. The structure holds its form for decades with minimal upkeep. No repainting, no replacing warped studs, no pest treatments.

🌏

Expand, Extend or Relocate

Need more space next year? Add bays to extend length, attach lean-tos for side coverage, or install mezzanine framing for a second level. If your site changes, the building can be disassembled and re-erected on a new foundation.

🏧

Design and Price Online in 3D

The online building configurator lets you set exact dimensions, roof profile, panel type, insulation, doors, windows, colors and accessories. See instant pricing, then download your configuration summary.

Span Engineering

Clear Span vs Single Span vs Multi-Span

The span type you choose depends on your use case. Open arenas and worship halls need clear span; multi-bay shops and warehouses can use multi-span at lower cost. Steel and Stud engineers each building to the right span for its intended use.

Clear Span

No columns, W up to 80 ft

Zero interior columns
Maximum floor plan flexibility
Ideal for sports, worship, hangars
Higher cost per sqft at wide spans

Single Span

Small builds, W up to 40 ft

Most affordable option
Fastest fabrication lead time
Great for small shops and storage
Limited to 40 ft max width
Customer Reviews

What Property Owners Say About Steel and Stud

Real customers, real use cases. See how 15,000+ property owners — from horse barn owners to commercial fleet operators — picked the right Steel and Stud building for their use.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We compared five metal building companies before choosing Steel and Stud for our 50x100 distribution warehouse. Their quote came in 28 percent under the nearest competitor for identical wind and snow ratings. The PE-stamped drawings sailed through our Shelby County permit office on the first submission with zero revisions. Building was fabricated, shipped and erected in under 10 weeks from deposit to occupancy."

TC
Thomas C.
Memphis, TN
50X100X18 WAREHOUSE
★★★★★

"Our 60x80 riding arena and equipment barn went up on our Montana ranch last fall. The Steel and Stud team walked us through every decision in the 3D configurator, from overhead door placement for tractor access to insulation thickness for our winters. Clear span interior gives the horses a full 60 feet of unobstructed arena space with no columns to navigate. Would absolutely recommend Steel and Stud to any rancher or equestrian facility."

LP
Linda P.
Bozeman, MT
60X80X16 AGRICULTURAL BUILDING
★★★★☆

"Expanded our auto body shop with a 40x60 industrial building from Steel and Stud. The erection crew was professional and efficient. Scheduling took about two weeks longer than originally quoted due to a holiday backlog, but the finished building is exactly what we specified and the pricing was fair. The 16-foot eave height gives us room for a two-post lift and still fits a paint booth without clearance issues. Good experience overall with Steel and Stud."

MR
Mike R.
Jacksonville, FL
40X60X16 INDUSTRIAL BUILDING
Common Questions

Use Case FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering the right steel building for your use case: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring, dimensions and use-specific engineering options.

Widths from 20 to 100+ feet, lengths from 20 to 200+ feet, eave heights from 10 to 24 feet. Buildings wider than 60 feet typically use multi-span framing with interior columns.

Shell pricing ranges from $8 to $22 per square foot depending on span, height, load ratings, insulation and accessories. Larger footprints cost less per foot due to fixed engineering spread over more area. Steel and Stud provides itemized quotes so you can compare line by line.

Clear span means zero interior columns, ideal when you need open floor space (warehouses, arenas, hangars). Multi-span uses interior columns to achieve wider total footprints (80 to 200+ feet) at lower cost. Choose based on how you plan to use the interior.

Yes. Every cold-formed steel building ships with professional structural engineering and stamped drawings ready for your local building department. No separate engineering fee.

Roll-up overhead doors to 24x16, walk-in doors, windows, skylights, gutters, insulation, wainscot, cupolas, lean-tos, mezzanine framing, crane rails and bi-fold hangar doors. Everything is configurable in the 3D designer.

Six to twelve weeks from approved engineering. Components ship on flatbed trucks to your site, ready for erection. Delivery is included in pricing for all 48 states.

Buildings under 40x60 can be owner-erected with the right equipment and experience. Larger structures need a professional crew with crane access. We can connect you with experienced erectors in your region.

Yes. Commercial financing, lease-to-own, equipment financing and monthly payment plans are all available. View all options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Steel Buildings By Use Case — How To Pick The Right One

Pre-engineered steel structures use cold-formed framing fabricated off-site to your exact specifications. The kit ships to your property, ready for ground-up assembly. This eliminates the weather delays, material waste and skilled-labor bottleneck of conventional construction, cutting total project cost by 40 to 60 percent on average. Steel and Stud has delivered this approach to thousands of commercial and agricultural property owners since 2004.

Available widths run from 20 to 100+ feet. Lengths extend from 20 to 200+ feet in bay increments. Eave heights span 10 to 24+ feet. Rigid frame engineering, a Steel and Stud core competency, delivers column-free interiors to 80 feet wide. Multi-span configurations push total width past 200 feet for campus-scale facilities.

What Drives Pricing in 2026

Total square footage, eave height, span type, local load requirements (wind, snow, seismic), insulation spec, door count and delivery distance all factor into your final quote. Rough benchmarks: $8 to $14 per square foot for agricultural shells, $12 to $18 for commercial buildings, $16 to $22+ for heavy industrial with crane rails or mezzanines. Larger footprints cost less per foot because fixed engineering is spread across more area.

How the 3D Building Configurator Works

The online design tool walks you through dimensions, roof profile (gable, gambrel, single slope), panel orientation, insulation layers, door and window placement, color selection and structural add-ons. It generates a live price estimate and downloadable configuration. A building specialist then finalizes the engineering package and prepares stamped drawings for your permit submission.

Industry Applications

Commercial: retail storefronts, auto shops, contractor yards, self-storage facilities. Industrial: manufacturing plants, distribution hubs, fleet maintenance bays. Agricultural: equipment barns, hay storage, livestock shelter, riding arenas. Institutional: churches, gyms, government facilities, aviation hangars, sports complexes. Each application benefits from open span interiors, fast erection and low lifetime maintenance.

Related Categories

For smaller enclosed structures, explore enclosed steel garages and open shelters by use case. For agricultural use, see metal barns. For individual framing components, browse purlins, standing seam, insulated panels and roofing systems.

READY TO BUILD THE RIGHT BUILDING FOR YOUR USE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who picked Steel and Stud for their specific use case — from backyard workshops to commercial fleet garages. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on every order.

View Cart